blob: 98278515e5cd4c5a1a2a4cd105138de2ee655551 [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
10|* This header provides a public inferface to a Clang library for extracting *|
11|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
Benjamin Kramer2f5db8b2014-08-13 16:25:19 +000016#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000018
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 31
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
84 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
85 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000086typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000087
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000088/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000089 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
90 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000091 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000092typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000093
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +000094/**
95 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
96 *
97 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
98 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
99 * yet been saved to disk.
100 */
101struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000102 /**
103 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000104 *
105 * This file must already exist in the file system.
106 */
107 const char *Filename;
108
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000109 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000110 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000111 */
112 const char *Contents;
113
114 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000115 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000116 */
117 unsigned long Length;
118};
119
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000120/**
121 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
122 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
123 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
124 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000125enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126 /**
127 * \brief The entity is available.
128 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000129 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000130 /**
131 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
132 * not recommended).
133 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000134 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000135 /**
136 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
137 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000138 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
139 /**
140 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
141 * an error.
142 */
143 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000144};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000145
146/**
147 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
148 */
149typedef struct CXVersion {
150 /**
151 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
152 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
153 */
154 int Major;
155 /**
156 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
157 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
158 * version '10'.
159 */
160 int Minor;
161 /**
162 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
164 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
165 */
166 int Subminor;
167} CXVersion;
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000168
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000170 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
171 *
172 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000173 *
174 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
175 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000176 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000177 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
178 * will be enumerated.
179 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000180 * Here is an example:
181 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000182 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000183 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
184 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000185 *
186 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
187 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
188 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
189 *
190 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000191 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000192 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000193 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
194 *
195 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
196 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000197 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
198 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
199 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000200 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
201 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000202 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000203 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000204 *
205 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
206 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
207 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000208 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
210 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000211
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000212/**
213 * \brief Destroy the given index.
214 *
215 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
216 * within that index have been destroyed.
217 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000219
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000220typedef enum {
221 /**
222 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
223 */
224 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
225
226 /**
227 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
228 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 *
230 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
231 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000232 */
233 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
234
235 /**
236 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
237 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000238 *
239 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
240 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000241 */
242 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
243
244 /**
245 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
246 * background priority.
247 */
248 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
249 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
250 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
251
252} CXGlobalOptFlags;
253
254/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000255 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000256 *
257 * For example:
258 * \code
259 * CXIndex idx = ...;
260 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
261 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
262 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
263 * \endcode
264 *
265 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
266 */
267CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
268
269/**
270 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
271 *
272 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
273 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
274 */
275CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
276
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000277/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000278 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000279 *
280 * @{
281 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000282
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000283/**
284 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
285 */
286typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000287
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000288
289/**
290 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000291 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000292CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000293
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000294/**
295 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
296 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000297CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000298
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000299/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000300 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
301 * across an indexing session.
302 */
303typedef struct {
304 unsigned long long data[3];
305} CXFileUniqueID;
306
307/**
308 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
309 *
310 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
311 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
312 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
313 * otherwise returns 0.
314*/
315CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
316
317/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000318 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
319 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000320 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000321 */
322CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
323clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
324
325/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000326 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
327 *
328 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000329 *
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000330 * \param file_name the name of the file.
331 *
332 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
333 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
334 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000335CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000336 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000337
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000338/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac3997e2014-08-16 00:26:19 +0000339 * \brief Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
340 * or they are both NULL.
341 */
342CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
343
344/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000345 * @}
346 */
347
348/**
349 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
350 *
351 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
352 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
353 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
354 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
355 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
356 * specific location information from those data types.
357 *
358 * @{
359 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000360
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000361/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000362 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
363 * unit.
364 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000365 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000366 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000367 */
368typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000369 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000370 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000371} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000372
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000373/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000374 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000375 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000376 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
377 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000378 */
379typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000380 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000381 unsigned begin_int_data;
382 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000383} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000384
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000385/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000386 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
387 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000388CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000389
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000390/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000391 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000392 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000393 * code.
394 *
395 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
396 * if they refer to different locations.
397 */
398CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
399 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000400
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000401/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000402 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
403 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000404 */
405CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
406 CXFile file,
407 unsigned line,
408 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000409/**
410 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
411 * in a particular translation unit.
412 */
413CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
414 CXFile file,
415 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000416
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000417/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000418 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
419 */
420CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
421
422/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000423 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
424 * the corresponding translation unit.
425 */
426CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
427
428/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000429 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
430 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000431CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000432
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000433/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000434 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
435 * locations.
436 */
437CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
438 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000439
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000440/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000441 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
442 *
443 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
444 */
445CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
446 CXSourceRange range2);
447
448/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000449 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000450 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000451CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000452
453/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000454 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
455 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000456 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000457 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
458 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000459 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000460 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
461 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000462 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000463 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000464 * source location points.
465 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000466 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000467 * source location points.
468 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000469 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
470 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000471 *
472 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
473 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000474 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000475CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
476 CXFile *file,
477 unsigned *line,
478 unsigned *column,
479 unsigned *offset);
480
481/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000482 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
483 * the given source location, as specified in a # line directive.
484 *
485 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
486 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000487 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000488 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
489 *
490 * static int func(void)
491 * {
492 * return 0;
493 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000494 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000495 *
496 * the location information returned by this function would be
497 *
498 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
499 *
500 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
501 *
502 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
503 *
504 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
505 * into its parts.
506 *
507 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
508 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
509 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
510 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
511 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
512 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
513 * source location, an empty string is returned.
514 *
515 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
516 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
517 *
518 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
519 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
520 */
521CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
522 CXString *filename,
523 unsigned *line,
524 unsigned *column);
525
526/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000527 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
528 * by the given source location.
529 *
530 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000531 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000532 * details.
533 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000534CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
535 CXFile *file,
536 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000537 unsigned *column,
538 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000539
540/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000541 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
542 * the given source location.
543 *
544 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
545 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
546 *
547 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
548 * into its parts.
549 *
550 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
551 * source location points.
552 *
553 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
554 * source location points.
555 *
556 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
557 * source location points.
558 *
559 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
560 * buffer to which the given source location points.
561 */
562CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
563 CXFile *file,
564 unsigned *line,
565 unsigned *column,
566 unsigned *offset);
567
568/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000569 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
570 * the given source location.
571 *
572 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
573 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
574 * a macro argument.
575 *
576 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
577 * into its parts.
578 *
579 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
580 * source location points.
581 *
582 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
583 * source location points.
584 *
585 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
586 * source location points.
587 *
588 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
589 * buffer to which the given source location points.
590 */
591CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
592 CXFile *file,
593 unsigned *line,
594 unsigned *column,
595 unsigned *offset);
596
597/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000598 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
599 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000600 */
601CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
602
603/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000604 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
605 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000606 */
607CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
608
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000609/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000610 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000611 */
612typedef struct {
613 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
614 unsigned count;
615 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000616 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000617 */
618 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000619} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000620
621/**
622 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000623 *
624 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
625 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000626 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000627CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
628 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000629
630/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000631 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000632 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000633CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000634
635/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000636 * @}
637 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000638
639/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000640 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
641 *
642 * @{
643 */
644
645/**
646 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
647 */
648enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
649 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000650 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000651 * option.
652 */
653 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000654
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000655 /**
656 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
657 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
658 */
659 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
660
661 /**
662 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
663 * wrong.
664 */
665 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
666
667 /**
668 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
669 */
670 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
671
672 /**
673 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
674 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
675 * results.
676 */
677 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
678};
679
680/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000681 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
682 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
683 */
684typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
685
686/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000687 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
688 */
689typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
690
691/**
692 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
693 */
694CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
695
696/**
697 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
698 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000699 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000700 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
701 *
702 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
703 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
704 */
705CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
706 unsigned Index);
707
708
709/**
710 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
711 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
712 */
713enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
714 /**
715 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
716 */
717 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
718
719 /**
720 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
721 * deserialize diagnostics.
722 */
723 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
724
725 /**
726 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
727 * could not be opened.
728 */
729 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
730
731 /**
732 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000733 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000734 */
735 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
736};
737
738/**
739 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000740 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000741 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000742 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
743 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000744 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000745 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000746 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
747 *
748 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000749 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000750 */
751CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
752 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
753 CXString *errorString);
754
755/**
756 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
757 */
758CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
759
760/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000761 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
762 *
763 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000764 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000765 */
766CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
767
768/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000769 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
770 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000771 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000772CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
773
774/**
775 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
776 *
777 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
778 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
779 *
780 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
781 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
782 */
783CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
784 unsigned Index);
785
786/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000787 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
788 * translation unit.
789 *
790 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
791 */
792CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
793 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
794
795/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000796 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
797 */
798CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000799
800/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000801 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
802 *
803 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000804 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000805 */
806enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
807 /**
808 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
809 * diagnostic was located.
810 *
811 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
812 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
813 *
814 * \code
815 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
816 * \endcode
817 *
818 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
819 */
820 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
821
822 /**
823 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
824 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
825 *
826 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
827 */
828 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
829
830 /**
831 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
832 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
833 * machine-parsable format.
834 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000835 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000836 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
837 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000838 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
839
840 /**
841 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
842 *
843 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
844 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
845 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
846 */
847 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
848
849 /**
850 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
851 *
852 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
853 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
854 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
855 */
856 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
857
858 /**
859 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
860 *
861 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
862 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
863 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
864 */
865 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000866};
867
868/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000869 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000870 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000871 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000872 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
873 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000874 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
875 *
876 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
877 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000878 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000879 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000880 *
881 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000882 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000883CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
884 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000885
886/**
887 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
888 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
889 *
890 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000891 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000892 */
893CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
894
895/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000896 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
897 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000898CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000899clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
900
901/**
902 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
903 *
904 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
905 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
906 */
907CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
908
909/**
910 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
911 */
912CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000913
914/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000915 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
916 * diagnostic.
917 *
918 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
919 *
920 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
921 * diagnostic (if any).
922 *
923 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
924 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
925 */
926CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
927 CXString *Disable);
928
929/**
930 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
931 *
932 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
933 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
934 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
935 *
936 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
937 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
938 */
939CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
940
941/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000942 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
943 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
944 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000945 *
946 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
947 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
948 *
949 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
950 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000951CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
952CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
953
954/**
955 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
956 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000957 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
958 */
959CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000960
961/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000962 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
963 * diagnostic.
964 */
965CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000966
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000967/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000968 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000969 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000970 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000971 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000972 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000973 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000974 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000975 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000976 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000977 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000978 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000979 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000980CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000981 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000982
983/**
984 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
985 * given diagnostic.
986 */
987CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
988
989/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000990 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000991 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000992 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
993 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
994 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
995 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
996 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
997 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
998 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
999 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
1000 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001001 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001002 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
1003 *
1004 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
1005 *
1006 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1007 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1008 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1009 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1010 *
1011 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1012 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001013 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001014CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001015 unsigned FixIt,
1016 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001017
1018/**
1019 * @}
1020 */
1021
1022/**
1023 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1024 *
1025 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1026 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1027 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1028 *
1029 * @{
1030 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001031
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001032/**
1033 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1034 */
1035CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1036clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1037
1038/**
1039 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1040 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1041 *
1042 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1043 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1044 * specified command line arguments.
1045 *
1046 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1047 * are ignored:
1048 *
1049 * '-c'
1050 * '-emit-ast'
1051 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001052 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001053 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001054 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1055 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001056 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001057 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001058 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1059 *
1060 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1061 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1062 *
1063 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1064 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1065 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1066 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001067 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001068 *
1069 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1070 * unsaved_files.
1071 *
1072 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1073 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001074 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1075 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1076 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001077 */
1078CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1079 CXIndex CIdx,
1080 const char *source_filename,
1081 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001082 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001083 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001084 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001085
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001086/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001087 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1088 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1089 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1090 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001091 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001092CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1093 CXIndex CIdx,
1094 const char *ast_filename);
1095
1096/**
1097 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1098 *
1099 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1100 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1101 *
1102 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1103 */
1104CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1105 CXIndex CIdx,
1106 const char *ast_filename,
1107 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001108
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001109/**
1110 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1111 *
1112 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1113 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1114 * constructing the translation unit.
1115 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001116enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1117 /**
1118 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1119 * needed.
1120 */
1121 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1122
1123 /**
1124 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1125 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1126 *
1127 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1128 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1129 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1130 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1131 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1132 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001133 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1134
1135 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001136 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001137 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001138 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1139 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1140 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1141 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1142 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1143 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1144 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001145 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001146 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001147
1148 /**
1149 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1150 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1151 *
1152 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1153 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1154 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1155 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1156 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1157 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1158 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1159 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1160 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1161 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001162 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1163
1164 /**
1165 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1166 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1167 *
1168 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1169 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1170 * code-completion operations.
1171 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001172 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001173
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001174 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001175 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1176 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001177 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001178 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1179 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001180 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001181 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001182
1183 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001184 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001185 *
1186 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001187 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001188 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001189 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1190
1191 /**
1192 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1193 * parsing.
1194 *
1195 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1196 * ignoring the usages.
1197 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001198 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1199
1200 /**
1201 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1202 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1203 * unit.
1204 */
1205 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001206};
1207
1208/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001209 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1210 * unit that is being edited.
1211 *
1212 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1213 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1214 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1215 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1216 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1217 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1218 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1219 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001220CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001221
1222/**
1223 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1224 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1225 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1226 * error codes.
1227 */
1228CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1229clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1230 const char *source_filename,
1231 const char *const *command_line_args,
1232 int num_command_line_args,
1233 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1234 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1235 unsigned options);
1236
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001237/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001238 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1239 * to that file.
1240 *
1241 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1242 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1243 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1244 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1245 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1246 *
1247 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1248 * associated.
1249 *
1250 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001251 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001252 *
1253 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1254 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1255 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1256 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001257 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001258 *
1259 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001260 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001261 *
1262 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001263 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001264 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1265 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1266 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1267 *
1268 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1269 * unsaved_files.
1270 *
1271 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1272 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1273 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1274 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001275 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1276 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1277 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1278 *
1279 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001280 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001281CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1282clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1283 const char *source_filename,
1284 const char *const *command_line_args,
1285 int num_command_line_args,
1286 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1287 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1288 unsigned options,
1289 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1290
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001291/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001292 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1293 *
1294 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1295 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1296 * saving the translation unit.
1297 */
1298enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1299 /**
1300 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1301 */
1302 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1303};
1304
1305/**
1306 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1307 * unit.
1308 *
1309 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1310 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1311 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1312 * the most commonly-requested data.
1313 */
1314CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1315
1316/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001317 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1318 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1319 */
1320enum CXSaveError {
1321 /**
1322 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1323 */
1324 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1325
1326 /**
1327 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1328 * the file.
1329 *
1330 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1331 * write the file.
1332 */
1333 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1334
1335 /**
1336 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1337 * to save the translation unit.
1338 *
1339 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1340 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1341 */
1342 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1343
1344 /**
1345 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1346 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1347 */
1348 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1349};
1350
1351/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001352 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1353 * that translation unit on disk.
1354 *
1355 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1356 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1357 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1358 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1359 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1360 * units.
1361 *
1362 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001363 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001364 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1365 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001366 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1367 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1368 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1369 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001370 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1371 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1372 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001373 */
1374CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001375 const char *FileName,
1376 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001377
1378/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001379 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1380 */
1381CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001382
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001383/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001384 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1385 *
1386 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1387 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1388 * reparsing the translation unit.
1389 */
1390enum CXReparse_Flags {
1391 /**
1392 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1393 */
1394 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1395};
1396
1397/**
1398 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1399 * unit.
1400 *
1401 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1402 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1403 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1404 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1405 * to the next.
1406 */
1407CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1408
1409/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001410 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1411 *
1412 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1413 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1414 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1415 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1416 * was originally parsed.
1417 *
1418 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1419 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1420 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1421 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1422 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1423 * unit using this routine.
1424 *
1425 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1426 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1427 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1428 *
1429 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1430 * unsaved_files.
1431 *
1432 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1433 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1434 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1435 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1436 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1437 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001438 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1439 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1440 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1441 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001442 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001443 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001444 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1445 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1446 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001447 */
1448CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1449 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001450 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1451 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001452
1453/**
1454 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1455 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001456enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1457 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1458 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1459 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1460 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001461 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001462 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001463 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001464 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1465 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1466 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001467 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1468 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001469 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001470 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001471 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1472 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001473 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001474
1475 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001476 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001477};
1478
1479/**
1480 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001481 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001482 */
1483CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001484const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001485
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001486typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001487 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001488 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1489 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1490 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001491 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001492} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001493
1494/**
1495 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1496 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001497typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001498 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1499 void *data;
1500
1501 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1502 unsigned numEntries;
1503
1504 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1505 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001506 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001507
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001508} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001509
1510/**
1511 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001512 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001513 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001514CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001515
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001516CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001517
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001518/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001519 * @}
1520 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001521
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001522/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001523 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1524 */
1525enum CXCursorKind {
1526 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001527 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001528 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001529 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001530 *
1531 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1532 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1533 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1534 * of the declaration is not reported.
1535 */
1536 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1537 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001538 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001539 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1540 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1541 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1542 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1543 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1544 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001545 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001546 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1547 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1548 */
1549 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1550 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1551 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1552 /** \brief A function. */
1553 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1554 /** \brief A variable. */
1555 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1556 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1557 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001558 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001559 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001560 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001561 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001562 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001563 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001564 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001565 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1566 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1567 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1568 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1569 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1570 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1571 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001572 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001573 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001574 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001575 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
Saleem Abdulrasool993b2862015-08-12 03:21:44 +00001576 /** \brief A typedef. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001577 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001578 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1579 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001580 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1581 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001582 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1583 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001584 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1585 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1586 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1587 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1588 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1589 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001590 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1591 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1592 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1593 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1594 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1595 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1596 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1597 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001598 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1599 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001600 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1601 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001602 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1603 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001604 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1605 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001606 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001607 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001608 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1609 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001610 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001611 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001612 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001613 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001614 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1615 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001616
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001617 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001618 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001619
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001620 /* References */
1621 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001622 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001623 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1624 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1625 /**
1626 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1627 *
1628 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1629 * declared. For example, given:
1630 *
1631 * \code
1632 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1633 * size_type size;
1634 * \endcode
1635 *
1636 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1637 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1638 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1639 */
1640 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001641 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001642 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001643 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1644 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001645 */
1646 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001647 /**
1648 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1649 */
1650 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001651 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001652 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1653 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001654 */
1655 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001656 /**
1657 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1658 *
1659 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1660 * goto statement in the following example:
1661 *
1662 * \code
1663 * start_over:
1664 * ++counter;
1665 *
1666 * goto start_over;
1667 * \endcode
1668 *
1669 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1670 */
1671 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1672
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001673 /**
1674 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1675 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1676 *
1677 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1678 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1679 *
1680 * \code
1681 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1682 *
1683 * struct X { ... };
1684 * void swap(X&, X&);
1685 *
1686 * template<typename T>
1687 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1688 * while (first < last - 1) {
1689 * swap(*first, *--last);
1690 * ++first;
1691 * }
1692 * }
1693 *
1694 * struct Y { };
1695 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1696 * \endcode
1697 *
1698 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1699 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1700 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1701 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1702 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1703 * example).
1704 *
1705 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1706 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1707 * referenced by this cursor.
1708 */
1709 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1710
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001711 /**
1712 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1713 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1714 */
1715 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1716
1717 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001718
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001719 /* Error conditions */
1720 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1721 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1722 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1723 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001724 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1725 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001726
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001727 /* Expressions */
1728 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001729
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001730 /**
1731 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001732 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001733 *
1734 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1735 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1736 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1737 * expression is not reported.
1738 */
1739 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001740
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001741 /**
1742 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001743 * as a function, variable, or enumerator.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001744 */
1745 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001746
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001747 /**
1748 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1749 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1750 */
1751 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001752
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001753 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1754 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001755
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001756 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1757 object or class. */
1758 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001759
1760 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1761 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1762
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001763 /** \brief An integer literal.
1764 */
1765 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1766
1767 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1768 */
1769 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1770
1771 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1772 */
1773 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1774
1775 /** \brief A string literal.
1776 */
1777 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1778
1779 /** \brief A character literal.
1780 */
1781 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1782
1783 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1784 *
1785 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1786 */
1787 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1788
1789 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1790 * alignof).
1791 */
1792 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1793
1794 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1795 */
1796 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1797
1798 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1799 * "x <= y".
1800 */
1801 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1802
1803 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1804 */
1805 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1806
1807 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1808 */
1809 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1810
1811 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1812 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1813 *
1814 * For example: (int)f.
1815 */
1816 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1817
1818 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1819 */
1820 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1821
1822 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1823 */
1824 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1825
1826 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1827 */
1828 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1829
1830 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1831 */
1832 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1833
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001834 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001835 */
1836 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1837
1838 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1839 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1840 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1841 *
1842 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1843 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1844 * match the size of a pointer).
1845 */
1846 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1847
1848 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1849 */
1850 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1851
1852 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1853 */
1854 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1855
1856 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1857 */
1858 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1859
1860 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
1861 */
1862 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
1863
1864 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
1865 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
1866 *
1867 * Example:
1868 * \code
1869 * x = int(0.5);
1870 * \endcode
1871 */
1872 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
1873
1874 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
1875 */
1876 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
1877
1878 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
1879 */
1880 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
1881
1882 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
1883 */
1884 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
1885
1886 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
1887 */
1888 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
1889
1890 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
1891 *
1892 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
1893 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
1894 */
1895 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
1896
1897 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
1898 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
1899 */
1900 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
1901
1902 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
1903 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
1904 */
1905 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
1906
1907 /** \brief A unary expression.
1908 */
1909 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
1910
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00001911 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001912 */
1913 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
1914
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001915 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001916 */
1917 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
1918
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001919 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001920 */
1921 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
1922
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001923 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001924 */
1925 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
1926
1927 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
1928 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
1929 *
1930 * \code
1931 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
1932 * \endcode
1933 */
1934 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
1935
1936 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
1937 * expressions.
1938 *
1939 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
1940 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
1941 *
1942 * \code
1943 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
1944 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
1945 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
1946 * }
1947 * \endcode
1948 */
1949 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
1950
1951 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
1952 * pack.
1953 *
1954 * \code
1955 * template<typename ...Types>
1956 * struct count {
1957 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
1958 * };
1959 * \endcode
1960 */
1961 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
1962
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001963 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
1964 * object.
1965 *
1966 * \code
1967 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
1968 * std::sort(x, x + N,
1969 * [](float a, float b) {
1970 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
1971 * });
1972 * }
1973 * \endcode
1974 */
1975 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
1976
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00001977 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
1978 */
1979 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
1980
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001981 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00001982 */
1983 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
1984
Alexey Bataev1a3320e2015-08-25 14:24:04 +00001985 /** \brief OpenMP 4.0 [2.4, Array Section].
1986 */
1987 CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
1988
1989 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001990
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001991 /* Statements */
1992 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
1993 /**
1994 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
1995 * interface.
1996 *
1997 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
1998 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
1999 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
2000 * reported.
2001 */
2002 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00002003
2004 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
2005 *
2006 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
2007 * the following example:
2008 *
2009 * \code
2010 * start_over:
2011 * ++counter;
2012 * \endcode
2013 *
2014 */
2015 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002016
2017 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2018 *
2019 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2020 * bodies.
2021 */
2022 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2023
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002024 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002025 */
2026 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2027
2028 /** \brief A default statement.
2029 */
2030 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2031
2032 /** \brief An if statement
2033 */
2034 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2035
2036 /** \brief A switch statement.
2037 */
2038 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2039
2040 /** \brief A while statement.
2041 */
2042 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2043
2044 /** \brief A do statement.
2045 */
2046 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2047
2048 /** \brief A for statement.
2049 */
2050 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2051
2052 /** \brief A goto statement.
2053 */
2054 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2055
2056 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2057 */
2058 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2059
2060 /** \brief A continue statement.
2061 */
2062 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2063
2064 /** \brief A break statement.
2065 */
2066 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2067
2068 /** \brief A return statement.
2069 */
2070 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2071
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002072 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002073 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002074 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002075 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002076
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002077 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002078 */
2079 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2080
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002081 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002082 */
2083 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2084
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002085 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002086 */
2087 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2088
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002089 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002090 */
2091 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2092
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002093 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002094 */
2095 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2096
2097 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2098 */
2099 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2100
2101 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2102 */
2103 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2104
2105 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2106 */
2107 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2108
2109 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2110 */
2111 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2112
2113 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2114 */
2115 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2116
2117 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2118 */
2119 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2120
2121 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2122 */
2123 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2124
2125 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2126 */
2127 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2128
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002129 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2130 */
2131 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2132
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002133 /** \brief The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002134 *
2135 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2136 */
2137 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2138
2139 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2140 * expressions.
2141 */
2142 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2143
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002144 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2145 */
2146 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2147
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002148 /** \brief OpenMP SIMD directive.
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002149 */
2150 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2151
Alexey Bataevf29276e2014-06-18 04:14:57 +00002152 /** \brief OpenMP for directive.
2153 */
2154 CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
2155
Alexey Bataevd3f8dd22014-06-25 11:44:49 +00002156 /** \brief OpenMP sections directive.
2157 */
2158 CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
2159
Alexey Bataev1e0498a2014-06-26 08:21:58 +00002160 /** \brief OpenMP section directive.
2161 */
2162 CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
2163
Alexey Bataevd1e40fb2014-06-26 12:05:45 +00002164 /** \brief OpenMP single directive.
2165 */
2166 CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
2167
Alexey Bataev4acb8592014-07-07 13:01:15 +00002168 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for directive.
2169 */
2170 CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
2171
Alexey Bataev84d0b3e2014-07-08 08:12:03 +00002172 /** \brief OpenMP parallel sections directive.
2173 */
2174 CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
2175
Alexey Bataev9c2e8ee2014-07-11 11:25:16 +00002176 /** \brief OpenMP task directive.
2177 */
2178 CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
2179
Alexander Musman80c22892014-07-17 08:54:58 +00002180 /** \brief OpenMP master directive.
2181 */
2182 CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
2183
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002184 /** \brief OpenMP critical directive.
2185 */
2186 CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
2187
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002188 /** \brief OpenMP taskyield directive.
2189 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002190 CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002191
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002192 /** \brief OpenMP barrier directive.
2193 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002194 CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002195
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002196 /** \brief OpenMP taskwait directive.
2197 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002198 CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002199
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002200 /** \brief OpenMP flush directive.
2201 */
2202 CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002203
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002204 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
2205 */
2206 CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
2207
Alexey Bataev9fb6e642014-07-22 06:45:04 +00002208 /** \brief OpenMP ordered directive.
2209 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002210 CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002211
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002212 /** \brief OpenMP atomic directive.
2213 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002214 CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002215
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002216 /** \brief OpenMP for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmanf82886e2014-09-18 05:12:34 +00002217 */
2218 CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
2219
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002220 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002221 */
2222 CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
2223
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002224 /** \brief OpenMP target directive.
2225 */
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002226 CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002227
Alexey Bataev13314bf2014-10-09 04:18:56 +00002228 /** \brief OpenMP teams directive.
2229 */
2230 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
2231
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002232 /** \brief OpenMP taskgroup directive.
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002233 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002234 CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002235
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002236 /** \brief OpenMP cancellation point directive.
2237 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002238 CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002239
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002240 /** \brief OpenMP cancel directive.
2241 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002242 CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002243
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002244 /** \brief OpenMP target data directive.
2245 */
2246 CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
2247
2248 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002249
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002250 /**
2251 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2252 *
2253 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2254 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2255 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002256 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2257
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002258 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002259 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2260 /**
2261 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2262 * interface.
2263 */
2264 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2265
2266 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2267 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002268 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002269 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2270 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002271 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002272 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002273 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
Joey Gouly81228382014-05-01 15:41:58 +00002274 CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
2275 CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
2276 CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002277 CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
2278 CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
2279 CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
2280 CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
Eli Bendersky9b071472014-08-08 14:59:00 +00002281 CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +00002282 CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
2283 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_VisibilityAttr,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002284
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002285 /* Preprocessing */
2286 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002287 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002288 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2289 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002290 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002291 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002292 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2293
2294 /* Extra Declarations */
2295 /**
2296 * \brief A module import declaration.
2297 */
2298 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002299 CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002300 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002301 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl,
Francisco Lopes da Silva975a9f62015-01-21 16:24:11 +00002302
2303 /**
2304 * \brief A code completion overload candidate.
2305 */
2306 CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002307};
2308
2309/**
2310 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2311 * a translation unit.
2312 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002313 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002314 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2315 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2316 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2317 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2318 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2319 *
2320 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2321 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2322 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2323 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2324 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2325 * source code into the AST.
2326 */
2327typedef struct {
2328 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002329 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002330 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002331} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002332
2333/**
2334 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2335 *
2336 * @{
2337 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002338
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002339/**
2340 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2341 */
2342CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002343
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002344/**
2345 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2346 *
2347 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2348 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2349 */
2350CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2351
2352/**
2353 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2354 */
2355CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002356
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002357/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002358 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002359 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002360CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002361
2362/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002363 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2364 */
2365CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2366
2367/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002368 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2369 */
2370CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2371
2372/**
2373 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2374 */
2375CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2376
2377/**
2378 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2379 * reference.
2380 *
2381 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2382 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2383 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2384 */
2385CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2386
2387/**
2388 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2389 */
2390CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2391
2392/**
2393 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2394 */
2395CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2396
2397/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002398 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2399 */
2400CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2401
2402/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002403 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002404 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002405 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002406CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2407
2408/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002409 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2410 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002411 */
2412CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002413
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002414/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002415 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2416 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2417 */
2418CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2419
2420/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002421 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2422 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2423 */
2424CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2425
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002426/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002427 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2428 */
2429enum CXLinkageKind {
2430 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2431 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2432 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2433 /**
2434 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2435 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2436 */
2437 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2438 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2439 CXLinkage_Internal,
2440 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2441 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2442 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2443 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2444 CXLinkage_External
2445};
2446
2447/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002448 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002449 */
2450CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2451
2452/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002453 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2454 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002455 *
2456 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2457 *
2458 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2459 */
2460CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2461clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2462
2463/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002464 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2465 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2466 */
2467typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2468 /**
2469 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2470 * provides availability information.
2471 *
2472 * Possible values are "ios" or "macosx".
2473 */
2474 CXString Platform;
2475 /**
2476 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2477 */
2478 CXVersion Introduced;
2479 /**
2480 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2481 * still available).
2482 */
2483 CXVersion Deprecated;
2484 /**
2485 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2486 * is no longer available.
2487 */
2488 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2489 /**
2490 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2491 */
2492 int Unavailable;
2493 /**
2494 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2495 * suggest replacement APIs.
2496 */
2497 CXString Message;
2498} CXPlatformAvailability;
2499
2500/**
2501 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2502 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2503 *
2504 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2505 *
2506 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2507 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2508 *
2509 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2510 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2511 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2512 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002513 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002514 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2515 *
2516 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2517 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2518 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2519 *
2520 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2521 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2522 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2523 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2524 *
2525 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2526 * \c availability array.
2527 *
2528 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2529 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2530 *
2531 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2532 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2533 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2534 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2535 */
2536CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2537clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2538 int *always_deprecated,
2539 CXString *deprecated_message,
2540 int *always_unavailable,
2541 CXString *unavailable_message,
2542 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2543 int availability_size);
2544
2545/**
2546 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2547 */
2548CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2549clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2550
2551/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002552 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2553 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002554enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002555 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002556 CXLanguage_C,
2557 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002558 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002559};
2560
2561/**
2562 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2563 */
2564CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2565
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002566/**
2567 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2568 */
2569CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2570
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002571
2572/**
2573 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2574 */
2575typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2576
2577/**
2578 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2579 */
2580CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2581
2582/**
2583 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2584 */
2585CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2586
2587/**
2588 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2589 *
2590 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2591*/
2592CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2593 CXCursor cursor);
2594
2595/**
2596 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2597 *
2598 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2599*/
2600CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2601 CXCursor cursor);
2602
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002603/**
2604 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2605 *
2606 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2607 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2608 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2609 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2610 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2611 *
2612 * \code
2613 * class C {
2614 * void f();
2615 * };
2616 *
2617 * void C::f() { }
2618 * \endcode
2619 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002620 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002621 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2622 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002623 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002624 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2625 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2626 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2627 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2628 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2629 *
2630 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2631 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2632 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002633 *
2634 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002635 */
2636CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2637
2638/**
2639 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2640 *
2641 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2642 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2643 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2644 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2645 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2646 *
2647 * \code
2648 * class C {
2649 * void f();
2650 * };
2651 *
2652 * void C::f() { }
2653 * \endcode
2654 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002655 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002656 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2657 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002658 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002659 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2660 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2661 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2662 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2663 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2664 *
2665 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2666 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2667 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002668 *
2669 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2670 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002671 */
2672CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002673
2674/**
2675 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2676 * method.
2677 *
2678 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2679 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2680 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002681 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2682 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2683 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2684 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2685 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2686 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002687 *
2688 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2689 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2690 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2691 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2692 * base classes.
2693 *
2694 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2695 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2696 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2697 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2698 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2699 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2700 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2701 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2702 *
2703 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2704 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2705 * method overrides.
2706 *
2707 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2708 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2709 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2710 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2711 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2712 *
2713 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2714 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2715 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2716 */
2717CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2718 CXCursor **overridden,
2719 unsigned *num_overridden);
2720
2721/**
2722 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2723 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2724 */
2725CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2726
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002727/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002728 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
2729 * cursor.
2730 */
2731CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
2732
2733/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002734 * @}
2735 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002736
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002737/**
2738 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
2739 *
2740 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
2741 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
2742 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
2743 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
2744 *
2745 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00002746 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002747
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002748/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002749 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
2750 * location in the source code.
2751 *
2752 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
2753 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002754 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002755 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002756 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002757 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
2758 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
2759 *
2760 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
2761 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002762 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002763CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002764
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002765/**
2766 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
2767 * by the given cursor.
2768 *
2769 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002770 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
2771 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
2772 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002773 * source code.
2774 */
2775CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002776
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00002777/**
2778 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002779 * the given cursor.
2780 *
2781 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
2782 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002783 * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002784 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
2785 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
2786 * entity was actually used).
2787 */
2788CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00002789
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002790/**
2791 * @}
2792 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00002793
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002794/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002795 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
2796 *
2797 * @{
2798 */
2799
2800/**
2801 * \brief Describes the kind of type
2802 */
2803enum CXTypeKind {
2804 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002805 * \brief Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002806 */
2807 CXType_Invalid = 0,
2808
2809 /**
2810 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2811 * interface.
2812 */
2813 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
2814
2815 /* Builtin types */
2816 CXType_Void = 2,
2817 CXType_Bool = 3,
2818 CXType_Char_U = 4,
2819 CXType_UChar = 5,
2820 CXType_Char16 = 6,
2821 CXType_Char32 = 7,
2822 CXType_UShort = 8,
2823 CXType_UInt = 9,
2824 CXType_ULong = 10,
2825 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
2826 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
2827 CXType_Char_S = 13,
2828 CXType_SChar = 14,
2829 CXType_WChar = 15,
2830 CXType_Short = 16,
2831 CXType_Int = 17,
2832 CXType_Long = 18,
2833 CXType_LongLong = 19,
2834 CXType_Int128 = 20,
2835 CXType_Float = 21,
2836 CXType_Double = 22,
2837 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
2838 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
2839 CXType_Overload = 25,
2840 CXType_Dependent = 26,
2841 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
2842 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
2843 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
2844 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
2845 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_ObjCSel,
2846
2847 CXType_Complex = 100,
2848 CXType_Pointer = 101,
2849 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
2850 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
2851 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
2852 CXType_Record = 105,
2853 CXType_Enum = 106,
2854 CXType_Typedef = 107,
2855 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00002856 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
2857 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002858 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002859 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00002860 CXType_Vector = 113,
2861 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
2862 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00002863 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
Sergey Kalinichevc0151202015-11-15 13:10:10 +00002864 CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
2865 CXType_Auto = 118
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002866};
2867
2868/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002869 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
2870 */
2871enum CXCallingConv {
2872 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
2873 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
2874 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
2875 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
2876 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
2877 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
2878 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
2879 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Derek Schuff3970a7e2015-01-28 20:24:52 +00002880 /* Value 8 was PnaclCall, but it was never used, so it could safely be re-used. */
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00002881 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00002882 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = 10,
2883 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Reid Klecknerd7857f02014-10-24 17:42:17 +00002884 CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002885
2886 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
2887 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
2888};
2889
2890
2891/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002892 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
2893 *
2894 */
2895typedef struct {
2896 enum CXTypeKind kind;
2897 void *data[2];
2898} CXType;
2899
2900/**
2901 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
2902 */
2903CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
2904
2905/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00002906 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
2907 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
2908 *
2909 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
2910 */
2911CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
2912
2913/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002914 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
2915 *
2916 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
2917 * returned.
2918 */
2919CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
2920
2921/**
2922 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
2923 *
2924 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
2925 * returned.
2926 */
2927CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
2928
2929/**
2930 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
2931 * long long.
2932 *
2933 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
2934 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2935 * must be verified before calling this function.
2936 */
2937CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
2938
2939/**
2940 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
2941 * long long.
2942 *
2943 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
2944 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
2945 * must be verified before calling this function.
2946 */
2947CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
2948
2949/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00002950 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
2951 *
2952 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
2953 */
2954CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
2955
2956/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002957 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
2958 * cursor.
2959 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00002960 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
2961 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002962 */
2963CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
2964
2965/**
2966 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
2967 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00002968 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
2969 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
2970 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00002971 */
2972CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
2973
2974/**
Eli Benderskyc27a0c42014-10-10 20:01:05 +00002975 * \brief Describes the kind of a template argument.
2976 *
2977 * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
2978 * element descriptions.
2979 */
2980enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
2981 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
2982 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
2983 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
2984 CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
2985 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
2986 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
2987 CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
2988 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
2989 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
2990 /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
2991 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
2992};
2993
2994/**
2995 *\brief Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
2996 * template specialization.
2997 *
2998 * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
2999 * declaration, -1 is returned.
3000 *
3001 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3002 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3003 * void foo() { ... }
3004 *
3005 * template <>
3006 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3007 *
3008 * The value 3 would be returned from this call.
3009 */
3010CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
3011
3012/**
3013 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
3014 *
3015 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
3016 * template argument kind is returned.
3017 *
3018 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3019 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3020 * void foo() { ... }
3021 *
3022 * template <>
3023 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3024 *
3025 * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
3026 * respectively.
3027 */
3028CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(
3029 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3030
3031/**
3032 * \brief Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
3033 * function decl representing a template specialization.
3034 *
3035 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
3036 * template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
3037 * is returned.
3038 *
3039 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3040 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3041 * void foo() { ... }
3042 *
3043 * template <>
3044 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3045 *
3046 * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
3047 * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
3048 */
3049CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
3050 unsigned I);
3051
3052/**
3053 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3054 * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
3055 *
3056 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3057 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3058 *
3059 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3060 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3061 * void foo() { ... }
3062 *
3063 * template <>
3064 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3065 *
3066 * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
3067 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3068 */
3069CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
3070 unsigned I);
3071
3072/**
3073 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3074 * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
3075 *
3076 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3077 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3078 *
3079 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3080 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3081 * void foo() { ... }
3082 *
3083 * template <>
3084 * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
3085 *
3086 * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
3087 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3088 */
3089CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(
3090 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3091
3092/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003093 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003094 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003095 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
3096 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003097 */
3098CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
3099
3100/**
3101 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
3102 *
3103 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
3104 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
3105 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
3106 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
3107 */
3108CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
3109
3110/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003111 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
3112 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
3113 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003114 */
3115CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
3116
3117/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003118 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
3119 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
3120 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003121 */
3122CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
3123
3124/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003125 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
3126 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
3127 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003128 */
3129CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
3130
3131/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003132 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003133 */
3134CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
3135
3136/**
3137 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
3138 */
3139CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
3140
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00003141/**
3142 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
3143 */
3144CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003145
3146/**
3147 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
3148 */
3149CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
3150
3151/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003152 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
3153 *
3154 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
3155 */
3156CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
3157
3158/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003159 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003160 *
3161 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003162 */
3163CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
3164
3165/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003166 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003167 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003168 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003169 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003170 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003171CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003172
3173/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003174 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003175 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003176 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
3177 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003178 */
3179CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3180
3181/**
3182 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003183 */
3184CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
3185
3186/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003187 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003188 *
3189 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00003190 */
3191CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
3192
3193/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00003194 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
3195 * otherwise.
3196 */
3197CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
3198
3199/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003200 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
3201 *
3202 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
3203 * an invalid type is returned.
3204 */
3205CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
3206
3207/**
3208 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
3209 *
3210 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
3211 * -1 is returned.
3212 */
3213CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
3214
3215/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003216 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
3217 *
3218 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3219 */
3220CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
3221
3222/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00003223 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003224 *
3225 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
3226 */
3227CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
3228
3229/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003230 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
3231 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
3232 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3233 *
3234 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3235 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3236 */
3237enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3238 /**
3239 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3240 */
3241 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3242 /**
3243 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3244 */
3245 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3246 /**
3247 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3248 */
3249 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3250 /**
3251 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3252 */
3253 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3254 /**
3255 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3256 */
3257 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3258};
3259
3260/**
3261 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3262 * standard.
3263 *
3264 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3265 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3266 * is returned.
3267 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3268 * returned.
3269 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3270 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3271 */
3272CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3273
3274/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003275 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3276 *
3277 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3278 */
3279CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3280
3281/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003282 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3283 *
3284 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3285 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3286 * is returned.
3287 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3288 * returned.
3289 */
3290CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3291
3292/**
3293 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3294 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3295 *
3296 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3297 * is returned.
3298 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3299 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3300 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3301 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3302 * If the field's name S is not found,
3303 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3304 */
3305CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3306
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00003307/**
3308 * \brief Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
3309 *
3310 * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
3311 * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
3312 * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3313 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3314 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3315 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3316 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3317 * If the field's name S is not found,
3318 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3319 */
3320CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
3321
3322/**
3323 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
3324 * declaration.
3325 */
3326CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
3327
3328
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003329enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3330 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3331 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3332 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3333 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3334 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3335 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3336};
3337
3338/**
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003339 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given class template
3340 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a class template specialization.
3341 *
3342 * Variadic argument packs count as only one argument, and can not be inspected
3343 * further.
3344 */
3345CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3346
3347/**
3348 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3349 * at given index.
3350 *
3351 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3352 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3353 */
3354CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3355
3356/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003357 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3358 *
3359 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3360 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3361 */
3362CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3363
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003364/**
3365 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3366 * bitfield.
3367 */
3368CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3369
3370/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003371 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3372 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3373 */
3374CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3375
3376/**
3377 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3378 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3379 */
3380enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3381 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3382 CX_CXXPublic,
3383 CX_CXXProtected,
3384 CX_CXXPrivate
3385};
3386
3387/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003388 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003389 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003390 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3391 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3392 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003393 */
3394CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3395
3396/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003397 * \brief Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00003398 * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003399 */
3400enum CX_StorageClass {
3401 CX_SC_Invalid,
3402 CX_SC_None,
3403 CX_SC_Extern,
3404 CX_SC_Static,
3405 CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
3406 CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
3407 CX_SC_Auto,
3408 CX_SC_Register
3409};
3410
3411/**
3412 * \brief Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
3413 *
3414 * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
3415 * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
3416 */
3417CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
3418
3419/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003420 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3421 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3422 *
3423 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3424 *
3425 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3426 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3427 */
3428CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3429
3430/**
3431 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3432 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3433 *
3434 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3435 *
3436 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3437 * the cursor.
3438 *
3439 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3440 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3441 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3442 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3443 */
3444CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3445 unsigned index);
3446
3447/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003448 * @}
3449 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003450
3451/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003452 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003453 *
3454 * @{
3455 */
3456
3457
3458/**
3459 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3460 * this function returns the collection element type.
3461 *
3462 */
3463CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3464
3465/**
3466 * @}
3467 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003468
3469/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003470 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3471 *
3472 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3473 * using cursors.
3474 *
3475 * @{
3476 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003477
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003478/**
3479 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3480 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3481 *
3482 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3483 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3484 */
3485enum CXChildVisitResult {
3486 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003487 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003488 */
3489 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003490 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003491 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3492 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3493 */
3494 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3495 /**
3496 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3497 * the same visitor and client data.
3498 */
3499 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3500};
3501
3502/**
3503 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3504 *
3505 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3506 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3507 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3508 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3509 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3510 *
3511 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3512 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3513 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003514typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3515 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003516 CXClientData client_data);
3517
3518/**
3519 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3520 *
3521 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3522 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3523 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3524 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3525 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3526 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003527 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003528 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003529 * definition, have no children).
3530 *
3531 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3532 * child of \p parent.
3533 *
3534 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3535 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3536 *
3537 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3538 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3539 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003540CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003541 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3542 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003543#ifdef __has_feature
3544# if __has_feature(blocks)
3545/**
3546 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3547 *
3548 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3549 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3550 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3551 *
3552 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3553 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3554 */
3555typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3556 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3557
3558/**
3559 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3560 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3561 */
3562unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3563 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
3564# endif
3565#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003566
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003567/**
3568 * @}
3569 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003570
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003571/**
3572 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3573 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003574 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003575 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3576 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3577 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3578 *
3579 * @{
3580 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003581
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003582/**
3583 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3584 * by the given cursor.
3585 *
3586 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3587 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3588 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3589 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3590 */
3591CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3592
3593/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003594 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3595 */
3596CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3597
3598/**
3599 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3600 */
3601CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003602 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003603 const char *category_name);
3604
3605/**
3606 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3607 */
3608CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3609 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3610
3611
3612/**
3613 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
3614 * the USR for its containing class.
3615 */
3616CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
3617 CXString classUSR);
3618
3619/**
3620 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
3621 * the USR for its containing class.
3622 */
3623CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
3624 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
3625 CXString classUSR);
3626
3627/**
3628 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
3629 * for its containing class.
3630 */
3631CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
3632 CXString classUSR);
3633
3634/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003635 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3636 */
3637CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
3638
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003639/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003640 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
3641 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003642 * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
3643 * pieces for each selector identifier.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003644 *
3645 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
3646 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
3647 *
3648 * \param options Reserved.
3649 */
3650CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
3651 unsigned pieceIndex,
3652 unsigned options);
3653
3654/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003655 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3656 *
3657 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
3658 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
3659 * class template specialization.
3660 */
3661CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
3662
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003663/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
3664 * entity that it references.
3665 *
3666 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
3667 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003668 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003669 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
3670 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003671 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003672 */
3673CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003674
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003675/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003676 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
3677 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
3678 * that entity.
3679 *
3680 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
3681 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
3682 * definition. For example, given:
3683 *
3684 * \code
3685 * int f(int, int);
3686 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
3687 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
3688 * int f(int, int);
3689 * \endcode
3690 *
3691 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
3692 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
3693 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
3694 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
3695 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
3696 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
3697 * declaration).
3698 *
3699 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
3700 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
3701 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
3702 */
3703CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3704
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003705/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003706 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
3707 * is also a definition of that entity.
3708 */
3709CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3710
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003711/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003712 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
3713 *
3714 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
3715 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
3716 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
3717 *
3718 * \code
3719 * struct X;
3720 * struct X;
3721 * struct X {
3722 * int member;
3723 * };
3724 * \endcode
3725 *
3726 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
3727 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
3728 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
3729 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
3730 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
3731 * comparing their canonical cursors.
3732 *
3733 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
3734 */
3735CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
3736
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003737
3738/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003739 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
3740 * method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003741 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003742 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003743 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
3744 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003745 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003746 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
3747 * otherwise.
3748 */
3749CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
3750
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003751/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003752 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
3753 * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003754 *
3755 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003756 * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
3757 * or a specific class.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003758 *
3759 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
3760 * method/message, it will return zero.
3761 */
3762CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
3763
3764/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003765 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message, returns the CXType
3766 * of the receiver.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00003767 */
3768CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
3769
3770/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003771 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
3772 */
3773typedef enum {
3774 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
3775 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
3776 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
3777 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
3778 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
3779 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
3780 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
3781 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
3782 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
3783 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
3784 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
3785 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
3786 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800
3787} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
3788
3789/**
3790 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
3791 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
3792 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
3793 *
3794 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
3795 */
3796CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
3797 unsigned reserved);
3798
3799/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003800 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003801 * Objective-C method declarations.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003802 */
3803typedef enum {
3804 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
3805 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
3806 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
3807 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
3808 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
3809 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
3810 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
3811} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
3812
3813/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003814 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
3815 * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
3816 * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
3817 * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003818 */
3819CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
3820
3821/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003822 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
3823 * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "@optional".
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00003824 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "@required".
3825 */
3826CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
3827
3828/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00003829 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
3830 */
3831CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
3832
3833/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00003834 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3835 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
3836 * with whitespace in between.
3837 */
3838CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
3839
3840/**
3841 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3842 * comment text, including comment markers.
3843 */
3844CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
3845
3846/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003847 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
3848 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
3849 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00003850 */
3851CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
3852
3853/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003854 * @}
3855 */
3856
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003857/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
3858 *
3859 * @{
3860 */
3861
3862/**
3863 * \brief Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
3864 */
3865CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
3866
3867/**
Saleem Abdulrasool60034432015-11-12 03:57:22 +00003868 * \brief Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
3869 * constructor or destructor at the cursor.
3870 */
3871CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
3872
3873/**
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00003874 * @}
3875 */
3876
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00003877/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003878 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
3879 *
3880 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
3881 *
3882 * @{
3883 */
3884
3885typedef void *CXModule;
3886
3887/**
3888 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
3889 */
3890CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
3891
3892/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6d49c32014-05-14 23:14:37 +00003893 * \brief Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
3894 * exists.
3895 */
3896CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
3897
3898/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003899 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003900 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00003901 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
3902 */
3903CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
3904
3905/**
3906 * \param Module a module object.
3907 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003908 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
3909 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
3910 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003911CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003912
3913/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003914 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003915 *
3916 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
3917 * will return "vector".
3918 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003919CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003920
3921/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003922 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003923 *
3924 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
3925 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003926CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003927
3928/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003929 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003930 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis884337f2014-05-15 04:44:25 +00003931 * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
3932 */
3933CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
3934
3935/**
3936 * \param Module a module object.
3937 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003938 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
3939 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00003940CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
3941 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003942
3943/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003944 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003945 *
3946 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
3947 *
3948 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
3949 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00003950CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00003951CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
3952 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00003953
3954/**
3955 * @}
3956 */
3957
3958/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00003959 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
3960 *
3961 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
3962 * to C++ language features.
3963 *
3964 * @{
3965 */
3966
3967/**
Saleem Abdulrasool6ea75db2015-10-27 15:50:22 +00003968 * \brief Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
3969 */
3970CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
3971
3972/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00003973 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
3974 * pure virtual.
3975 */
3976CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
3977
3978/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00003979 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
3980 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00003981 */
3982CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
3983
3984/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00003985 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
3986 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
3987 * one of the base classes.
3988 */
3989CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
3990
3991/**
Dmitri Gribenkoe570ede2014-04-07 14:59:13 +00003992 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
3993 * declared 'const'.
3994 */
3995CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
3996
3997/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00003998 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
3999 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4000 * the template.
4001 *
4002 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4003 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4004 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4005 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4006 *
4007 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4008 * declaration.
4009 *
4010 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4011 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4012 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4013 */
4014CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4015
4016/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004017 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4018 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4019 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4020 *
4021 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4022 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4023 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4024 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4025 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4026 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4027 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4028 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4029 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4030 *
4031 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4032 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4033 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4034 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4035 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4036 *
4037 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4038 * of a template.
4039 *
4040 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4041 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4042 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4043 */
4044CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004045
4046/**
4047 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4048 * covering that reference.
4049 *
4050 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4051 * an operator call.
4052 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4053 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4054 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4055 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4056 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4057 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004058 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004059 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4060 *
4061 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4062 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4063 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004064CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4065 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004066 unsigned PieceIndex);
4067
4068enum CXNameRefFlags {
4069 /**
4070 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4071 * range.
4072 */
4073 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4074
4075 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004076 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4077 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004078 */
4079 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4080
4081 /**
4082 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4083 *
4084 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4085 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4086 * \code
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004087 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004088 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4089 * \endcode
4090 */
4091 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4092};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004093
4094/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004095 * @}
4096 */
4097
4098/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004099 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4100 *
4101 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4102 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4103 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004104 *
4105 * @{
4106 */
4107
4108/**
4109 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4110 */
4111typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4112 /**
4113 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4114 */
4115 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004116
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004117 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004118 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004119 */
4120 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004121
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004122 /**
4123 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4124 */
4125 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004126
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004127 /**
4128 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4129 */
4130 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004131
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004132 /**
4133 * \brief A comment.
4134 */
4135 CXToken_Comment
4136} CXTokenKind;
4137
4138/**
4139 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4140 */
4141typedef struct {
4142 unsigned int_data[4];
4143 void *ptr_data;
4144} CXToken;
4145
4146/**
4147 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4148 */
4149CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004150
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004151/**
4152 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4153 *
4154 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4155 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4156 */
4157CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004158
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004159/**
4160 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4161 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004162CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004163 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004164
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004165/**
4166 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4167 */
4168CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4169
4170/**
4171 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4172 * lexical tokens.
4173 *
4174 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4175 *
4176 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4177 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4178 *
4179 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4180 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4181 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4182 *
4183 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4184 * array.
4185 *
4186 */
4187CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4188 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004189
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004190/**
4191 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4192 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4193 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004194 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4195 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4196 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4197 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4198 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4199 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4200 *
4201 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4202 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4203 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4204 *
4205 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4206 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4207 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4208 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4209 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004210 *
4211 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4212 *
4213 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4214 *
4215 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4216 *
4217 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4218 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4219 */
4220CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4221 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4222 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004223
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004224/**
4225 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4226 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004227CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004228 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004229
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004230/**
4231 * @}
4232 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004233
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004234/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004235 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4236 *
4237 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4238 * be relied upon.
4239 *
4240 * @{
4241 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004242
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004243/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004244CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004245CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4246 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004247 const char **endBuf,
4248 unsigned *startLine,
4249 unsigned *startColumn,
4250 unsigned *endLine,
4251 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004252CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004253CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4254 unsigned stack_size);
4255
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004256/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004257 * @}
4258 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004259
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004260/**
4261 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4262 *
4263 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4264 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4265 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4266 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4267 * routines provide support for code completion.
4268 *
4269 * @{
4270 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004271
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004272/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004273 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4274 *
4275 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4276 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4277 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4278 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4279 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4280 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4281 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4282 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004283 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004284 */
4285typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004286
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004287/**
4288 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4289 */
4290typedef struct {
4291 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004292 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004293 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004294 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004295 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4296 * referring to.
4297 *
4298 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4299 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4300 */
4301 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004302
4303 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004304 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4305 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4306 */
4307 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4308} CXCompletionResult;
4309
4310/**
4311 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4312 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004313 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4314 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004315 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4316 */
4317enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4318 /**
4319 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4320 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4321 *
4322 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004323 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004324 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4325 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4326 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4327 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4328 *
4329 * \code
4330 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4331 * \endcode
4332 *
4333 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4334 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4335 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4336 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4337 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4338 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004339 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004340 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4341 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4342 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4343 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4344 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004345 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004346 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4347 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4348 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4349 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4350 */
4351 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4352 /**
4353 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004354 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004355 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004356 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4357 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004358 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4359 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4360 * chunk.
4361 */
4362 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4363 /**
4364 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4365 *
4366 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4367 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4368 * be selected.
4369 */
4370 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4371 /**
4372 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4373 *
4374 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4375 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4376 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4377 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4378 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4379 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4380 */
4381 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4382 /**
4383 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4384 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004385 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004386 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4387 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4388 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4389 * by code completion.
4390 */
4391 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4392 /**
4393 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4394 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4395 *
4396 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4397 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4398 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4399 *
4400 * \code
4401 * int add(int x, int y);
4402 * \endcode
4403 *
4404 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4405 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4406 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4407 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004408 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004409 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4410 */
4411 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4412 /**
4413 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4414 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4415 */
4416 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4417 /**
4418 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4419 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4420 */
4421 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4422 /**
4423 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4424 */
4425 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4426 /**
4427 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4428 */
4429 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4430 /**
4431 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4432 */
4433 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4434 /**
4435 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4436 */
4437 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4438 /**
4439 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4440 */
4441 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4442 /**
4443 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4444 */
4445 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4446 /**
4447 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4448 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004449 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4450 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004451 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004452 *
4453 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004454 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004455 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4456 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004457 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4458 /**
4459 * \brief A colon (':').
4460 */
4461 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4462 /**
4463 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4464 */
4465 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4466 /**
4467 * \brief An '=' sign.
4468 */
4469 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4470 /**
4471 * Horizontal space (' ').
4472 */
4473 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4474 /**
4475 * Vertical space ('\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
4476 * perform indentation.
4477 */
4478 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004479};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004480
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004481/**
4482 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4483 *
4484 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4485 *
4486 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4487 *
4488 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4489 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004490CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004491clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4492 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004493
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004494/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004495 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004496 * completion string.
4497 *
4498 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4499 *
4500 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4501 *
4502 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4503 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004504CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004505clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4506 unsigned chunk_number);
4507
4508/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004509 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004510 * within a completion string.
4511 *
4512 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4513 *
4514 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4515 *
4516 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004517 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004518 */
4519CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4520clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4521 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004522
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004523/**
4524 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4525 */
4526CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4527clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4528
4529/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004530 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4531 *
4532 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4533 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4534 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4535 *
4536 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4537 *
4538 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4539 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4540 */
4541CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4542clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4543
4544/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004545 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4546 * string refers to.
4547 *
4548 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4549 *
4550 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4551 */
4552CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4553clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4554
4555/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004556 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4557 * completion string.
4558 *
4559 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4560 *
4561 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4562 * string.
4563 */
4564CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4565clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4566
4567/**
4568 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
4569 *
4570 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4571 *
4572 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
4573 * completion string.
4574 *
4575 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
4576 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
4577 */
4578CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4579clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4580 unsigned annotation_number);
4581
4582/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004583 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
4584 *
4585 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
4586 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
4587 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
4588 * or protocol as its context.
4589 *
4590 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
4591 * being queried.
4592 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00004593 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004594 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004595 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004596 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
4597 */
4598CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4599clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4600 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004601
4602/**
4603 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
4604 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
4605 */
4606CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4607clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4608
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004609/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00004610 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
4611 * definition cursor.
4612 *
4613 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
4614 *
4615 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
4616 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
4617 */
4618CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4619clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
4620
4621/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004622 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
4623 *
4624 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00004625 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004626 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
4627 */
4628typedef struct {
4629 /**
4630 * \brief The code-completion results.
4631 */
4632 CXCompletionResult *Results;
4633
4634 /**
4635 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
4636 * \c Results array.
4637 */
4638 unsigned NumResults;
4639} CXCodeCompleteResults;
4640
4641/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004642 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
4643 * modify its behavior.
4644 *
4645 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
4646 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4647 */
4648enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
4649 /**
4650 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
4651 * completions returned.
4652 */
4653 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
4654
4655 /**
4656 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
4657 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
4658 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004659 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
4660
4661 /**
4662 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
4663 * completions returned.
4664 */
4665 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004666};
4667
4668/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004669 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
4670 *
4671 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
4672 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
4673 */
4674enum CXCompletionContext {
4675 /**
4676 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
4677 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
4678 */
4679 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
4680
4681 /**
4682 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
4683 */
4684 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
4685
4686 /**
4687 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
4688 * should be included in the results.
4689 */
4690 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
4691 /**
4692 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
4693 * be included in the results.
4694 */
4695 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
4696 /**
4697 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
4698 * should be included in the results.
4699 */
4700 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
4701 /**
4702 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
4703 * included in the results.
4704 */
4705 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
4706
4707 /**
4708 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
4709 * operator should be included in the results.
4710 */
4711 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
4712 /**
4713 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
4714 * operator should be included in the results.
4715 */
4716 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
4717 /**
4718 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
4719 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
4720 */
4721 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
4722
4723 /**
4724 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
4725 */
4726 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
4727 /**
4728 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
4729 */
4730 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
4731 /**
4732 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
4733 */
4734 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
4735
4736 /**
4737 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
4738 */
4739 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
4740 /**
4741 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
4742 * included in the results.
4743 */
4744 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
4745 /**
4746 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
4747 * the results.
4748 */
4749 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
4750
4751 /**
4752 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
4753 * in the results.
4754 */
4755 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
4756 /**
4757 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
4758 * the results.
4759 */
4760 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
4761 /**
4762 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
4763 * the results.
4764 */
4765 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
4766 /**
4767 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
4768 * in the results.
4769 */
4770 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
4771 /**
4772 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
4773 * the results.
4774 */
4775 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
4776 /**
4777 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
4778 * the results.
4779 */
4780 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
4781
4782 /**
4783 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
4784 * the results.
4785 */
4786 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
4787
4788 /**
4789 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
4790 */
4791 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
4792
4793 /**
4794 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
4795 */
4796 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
4797};
4798
4799/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004800 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
4801 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4802 */
4803CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
4804
4805/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004806 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
4807 *
4808 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
4809 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
4810 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
4811 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
4812 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
4813 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
4814 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
4815 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
4816 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
4817 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
4818 *
4819 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
4820 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
4821 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
4822 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
4823 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
4824 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
4825 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
4826 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
4827 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
4828 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
4829 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
4830 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
4831 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
4832 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
4833 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
4834 * have a lower latency.
4835 *
4836 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
4837 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
4838 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
4839 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
4840 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
4841 *
4842 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
4843 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
4844 * included in the translation unit.
4845 *
4846 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
4847 *
4848 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
4849 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
4850 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
4851 *
4852 * \param unsaved_files the Tiles that have not yet been saved to disk
4853 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
4854 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
4855 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
4856 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
4857 * this function returns.
4858 *
4859 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
4860 * unsaved_files.
4861 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004862 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
4863 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
4864 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
4865 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
4866 * of code-completion options.
4867 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004868 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
4869 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
4870 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
4871 * completion fails, returns NULL.
4872 */
4873CINDEX_LINKAGE
4874CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4875 const char *complete_filename,
4876 unsigned complete_line,
4877 unsigned complete_column,
4878 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004879 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
4880 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004881
4882/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00004883 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
4884 * order.
4885 *
4886 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
4887 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
4888 */
4889CINDEX_LINKAGE
4890void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
4891 unsigned NumResults);
4892
4893/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004894 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
4895 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004896CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004897void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004898
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00004899/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004900 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
4901 * location where code completion was performed.
4902 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004903CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004904unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
4905
4906/**
4907 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
4908 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004909 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004910 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
4911 *
4912 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
4913 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
4914 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004915CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00004916CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
4917 unsigned Index);
4918
4919/**
Nico Weberdd9c19f2014-04-24 03:06:18 +00004920 * \brief Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004921 * the given code completion.
4922 *
4923 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4924 *
4925 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
4926 * along with the given code completion results.
4927 */
4928CINDEX_LINKAGE
4929unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
4930 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00004931
4932/**
4933 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
4934 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
4935 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
4936 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
4937 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
4938 *
4939 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4940 *
4941 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
4942 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
4943 * information, this value will be true.
4944 *
4945 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
4946 * container
4947 */
4948CINDEX_LINKAGE
4949enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
4950 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
4951 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
4952
4953/**
4954 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
4955 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
4956 * function will return the empty string.
4957 *
4958 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4959 *
4960 * \returns the USR for the container
4961 */
4962CINDEX_LINKAGE
4963CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004964
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00004965
4966/**
4967 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
4968 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
4969 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
4970 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
4971 *
4972 * \param Results the code completion results to query
4973 *
4974 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
4975 * for an Objective-C message send.
4976 */
4977CINDEX_LINKAGE
4978CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
4979
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004980/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00004981 * @}
4982 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004983
4984
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00004985/**
4986 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
4987 *
4988 * @{
4989 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00004990
4991/**
4992 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
4993 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
4994 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00004995CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00004996
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00004997
4998/**
4999 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5000 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005001 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5002 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005003 */
5004CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5005
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005006 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005007 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005008 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5009 *
5010 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005011 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005012 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5013 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5014 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5015 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5016 */
5017typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5018 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5019 unsigned include_len,
5020 CXClientData client_data);
5021
5022/**
5023 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5024 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5025 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5026 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5027 */
5028CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5029 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5030 CXClientData client_data);
5031
5032/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005033 * @}
5034 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005035
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005036/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5037 *
5038 * @{
5039 */
5040
5041/**
5042 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5043 */
5044typedef void *CXRemapping;
5045
5046/**
5047 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5048 *
5049 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5050 *
5051 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5052 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5053 */
5054CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5055
5056/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005057 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5058 *
5059 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5060 *
5061 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5062 *
5063 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5064 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5065 */
5066CINDEX_LINKAGE
5067CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5068 unsigned numFiles);
5069
5070/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005071 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5072 */
5073CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5074
5075/**
5076 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5077 *
5078 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5079 *
5080 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5081 * is associated with.
5082 */
5083CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5084 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5085
5086/**
5087 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5088 */
5089CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5090
5091/**
5092 * @}
5093 */
5094
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005095/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5096 *
5097 * @{
5098 */
5099
5100enum CXVisitorResult {
5101 CXVisit_Break,
5102 CXVisit_Continue
5103};
5104
5105typedef struct {
5106 void *context;
5107 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5108} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5109
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005110typedef enum {
5111 /**
5112 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5113 */
5114 CXResult_Success = 0,
5115 /**
5116 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5117 */
5118 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5119 /**
5120 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5121 * CXVisit_Break)
5122 */
5123 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5124
5125} CXResult;
5126
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005127/**
5128 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5129 *
5130 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5131 *
5132 * \param file to search for references.
5133 *
5134 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5135 * each reference found.
5136 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5137 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005138 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005139 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005140 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005141CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5142 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005143
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005144/**
5145 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5146 *
5147 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5148 *
5149 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5150 *
5151 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5152 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005153 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005154 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005155 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005156CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5157 CXFile file,
5158 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005159
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005160#ifdef __has_feature
5161# if __has_feature(blocks)
5162
5163typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5164 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5165
5166CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005167CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5168 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005169
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005170CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005171CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5172 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005173
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005174# endif
5175#endif
5176
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005177/**
5178 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5179 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005180typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005181
5182/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005183 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5184 */
5185typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5186
5187/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005188 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5189 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005190 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005191typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005192
5193/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005194 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5195 * or module).
5196 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005197typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005198
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005199/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005200 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005201 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005202typedef struct {
5203 void *ptr_data[2];
5204 unsigned int_data;
5205} CXIdxLoc;
5206
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005207/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005208 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005209 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005210typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005211 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005212 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005213 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005214 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005215 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005216 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005217 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005218 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005219 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005220 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005221 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005222 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005223 int isImport;
5224 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005225 /**
5226 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5227 * import.
5228 */
5229 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005230} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5231
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005232/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005233 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005234 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005235typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005236 /**
5237 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5238 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005239 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005240 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005241 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5242 */
5243 CXModule module;
5244 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005245 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005246 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005247 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005248 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005249 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005250 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005251 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005252 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005253
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005254} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5255
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005256typedef enum {
5257 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5258 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5259 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5260 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5261 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5262 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5263
5264 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5265 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5266 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5267
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005268 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5269 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5270 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5271 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005272
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005273 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5274 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5275 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005276
5277 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5278 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5279 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5280 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5281 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5282 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005283 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5284 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5285 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5286 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5287 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5288
5289} CXIdxEntityKind;
5290
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005291typedef enum {
5292 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5293 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5294 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
5295 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3
5296} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5297
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005298/**
5299 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5300 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5301 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5302 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5303 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5304 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5305 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5306 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5307 */
5308typedef enum {
5309 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5310 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5311 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5312 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5313} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5314
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005315typedef enum {
5316 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5317 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5318 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5319 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5320} CXIdxAttrKind;
5321
5322typedef struct {
5323 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5324 CXCursor cursor;
5325 CXIdxLoc loc;
5326} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5327
5328typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005329 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5330 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5331 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5332 const char *name;
5333 const char *USR;
5334 CXCursor cursor;
5335 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5336 unsigned numAttributes;
5337} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5338
5339typedef struct {
5340 CXCursor cursor;
5341} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5342
5343typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005344 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5345 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5346 CXCursor classCursor;
5347 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5348} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5349
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005350typedef enum {
5351 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5352} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5353
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005354typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005355 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005356 CXCursor cursor;
5357 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005358 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5359 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005360 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005361 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5362 */
5363 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005364 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005365 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005366 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005367 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005368 /**
5369 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005370 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005371 */
5372 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005373 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5374 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005375
5376 unsigned flags;
5377
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005378} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005379
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005380typedef enum {
5381 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5382 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5383 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5384} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005385
5386typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005387 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005388 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5389} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005390
5391typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005392 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5393 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005394 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005395} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005396
5397typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005398 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5399 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005400 CXIdxLoc loc;
5401} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5402
5403typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005404 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005405 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005406} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005407
5408typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005409 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5410 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5411 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5412} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005413
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005414typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005415 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5416 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5417 CXCursor classCursor;
5418 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5419 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5420} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5421
5422typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005423 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005424 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5425 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5426} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5427
5428typedef struct {
5429 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005430 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5431 unsigned numBases;
5432} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5433
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005434/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005435 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005436 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005437typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005438 /**
5439 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5440 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005441 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005442 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005443 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
5444 * via the dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005445 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005446 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005447} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5448
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005449/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005450 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005451 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005452typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005453 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005454 /**
5455 * \brief Reference cursor.
5456 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005457 CXCursor cursor;
5458 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005459 /**
5460 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5461 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005462 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005463 /**
5464 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5465 *
5466 * \code
5467 * Foo *var;
5468 * \endcode
5469 *
5470 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005471 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5472 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005473 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005474 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005475 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005476 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005477 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005478 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005479} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5480
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005481/**
5482 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5483 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5484 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005485typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005486 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005487 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5488 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5489 */
5490 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5491
5492 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005493 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005494 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005495 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005496 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005497
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005498 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005499 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005500
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005501 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005502 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005503 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005504 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005505 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005506
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005507 /**
5508 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
5509 *
5510 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
5511 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005512 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
5513 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005514 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005515 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005516 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005517
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005518 /**
5519 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
5520 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005521 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005522 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005523
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005524 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005525 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005526
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005527 /**
5528 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
5529 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005530 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005531 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005532
5533} IndexerCallbacks;
5534
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005535CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005536CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
5537clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005538
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005539CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
5540clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5541
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005542CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005543const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
5544clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5545
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005546CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
5547clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005548
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005549CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
5550clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5551
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005552CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
5553clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
5554
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005555CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
5556clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5557
5558/**
5559 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5560 * container.
5561 */
5562CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
5563clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
5564
5565/**
5566 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5567 * container.
5568 */
5569CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5570clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
5571
5572/**
5573 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5574 */
5575CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
5576clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
5577
5578/**
5579 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5580 */
5581CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5582clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
5583
5584/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005585 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5586 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005587 */
5588typedef void *CXIndexAction;
5589
5590/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005591 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5592 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005593 *
5594 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
5595 */
5596CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
5597
5598/**
5599 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
5600 *
5601 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
5602 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
5603 */
5604CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
5605
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005606typedef enum {
5607 /**
5608 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
5609 */
5610 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
5611
5612 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005613 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
5614 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
5615 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005616 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00005617 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
5618
5619 /**
5620 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
5621 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
5622 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00005623 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
5624
5625 /**
5626 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
5627 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
5628 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00005629 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
5630
5631 /**
5632 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
5633 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005634 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
5635
5636 /**
5637 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005638 * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005639 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
5640 */
5641 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
5642
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005643} CXIndexOptFlags;
5644
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005645/**
5646 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005647 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005648 *
5649 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5650 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
5651 *
5652 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
5653 * implements.
5654 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005655 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005656 * passed in index_callbacks.
5657 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005658 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
5659 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005660 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005661 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
5662 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005663 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005664 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005665 * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005666 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005667 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005668 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005669 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005670CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005671 CXClientData client_data,
5672 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5673 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
5674 unsigned index_options,
5675 const char *source_filename,
5676 const char * const *command_line_args,
5677 int num_command_line_args,
5678 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5679 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5680 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
5681 unsigned TU_options);
5682
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005683/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005684 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005685 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005686 *
5687 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
5688 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
5689 *
5690 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
5691 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
5692 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
5693 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005694 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005695 *
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005696 * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005697 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
5698 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005699CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005700 CXClientData client_data,
5701 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5702 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005703 unsigned index_options,
5704 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005705
5706/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005707 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
5708 * the given CXIdxLoc.
5709 *
5710 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
5711 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
5712 * retrieves the location of the argument.
5713 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005714CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005715 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005716 CXFile *file,
5717 unsigned *line,
5718 unsigned *column,
5719 unsigned *offset);
5720
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005721/**
5722 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
5723 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005724CINDEX_LINKAGE
5725CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
5726
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005727/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00005728 * \brief Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
5729 *
5730 * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
5731 * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
5732 * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
5733 * \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5734 *
5735 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
5736 * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5737 */
5738typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
5739 CXClientData client_data);
5740
5741/**
5742 * \brief Visit the fields of a particular type.
5743 *
5744 * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
5745 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
5746 * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
5747 * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5748 *
5749 * \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
5750 *
5751 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
5752 * field of \p T.
5753 *
5754 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5755 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
5756 *
5757 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
5758 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5759 */
5760CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T,
5761 CXFieldVisitor visitor,
5762 CXClientData client_data);
5763
5764
5765/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005766 * @}
5767 */
5768
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00005769/**
5770 * @}
5771 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005772
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00005773#ifdef __cplusplus
5774}
5775#endif
5776#endif
5777